JP2020022885A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing discomfort of a player.SOLUTION: Game balls that have passed through a passing port with an opening are alternately distributed to a first ball entrance port and a second ball entrance port by distribution means. A notification mode indicating that game balls has passed through the passing port is notified by notification means. In this way, since the notification mode is notified due to the passing of the passing port, a discomfort due to a time difference from the passing of the passing port till a ball entrance to the first ball entrance port or the second ball entrance port can be reduced by the notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the discomfort of a player can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a prize is notified by outputting a prize sound or the like based on a prize of a game medium to a ball entrance, and whether or not the prize is determined.

  In some cases, an introduction channel for introducing a game medium to the entrance is provided for the purpose of, for example, distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance.

  For example, in a gaming machine having two types of entrances, by allocating in the introduction flow path, it is possible to alternately win the game media to the two types of entrances, thereby enabling two types of entrances Gaming machines have been proposed that can prevent a ball from being biased toward one of the mouths.

JP 2012-231902 A

  However, in a gaming machine configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the inside of the introduction flow path, despite the player being unable to visually recognize the prize of the game medium to the entrance provided in the introduction flow path, Since a prize is notified by outputting a prize sound or the like based on a game medium prize at the entrance, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a player's discomfort.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a first ball entrance through which game balls can enter, a second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance Acquiring means for acquiring first information based on a game ball having entered the mouth and acquiring second information based on having entered a ball in the second entrance, and having the lottery condition satisfied A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Dynamic display means for displaying; storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied; and storing the first information or the second information in the storage means. Based on the information being stored, an identification symbol indicating the number of each is stored The bonus symbol game which is advantageous to the player is provided based on the display of the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the note display means and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and passing the passport through the game ball to the first entrance and the second entrance. The game device includes a sorting means capable of alternately sorting, and a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, when a game ball passes through the passing port, the passing game ball is connected to the first entrance and the second ball by the sorting means. There is provided a determining means for determining which of the two entrances is to be allocated to, and the notifying means notifies a notification mode in which a result of the determination by the determining means can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball in the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring the first information based on the fact that the ball has entered, and acquiring the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance; Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the obtained first information and the second information, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time. Means, storage means for storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information or the second information is stored in the storage means. Based on the above, an identification symbol indicating the number of storages is displayed on the display means. Identification symbol display means for displaying, and bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the display of the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. And a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing port can be alternately distributed to the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port. A possible distributing means, and a notifying means for notifying a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  Thereby, the notification mode is notified by passing through the passage opening, so that a sense of incongruity due to a time difference from passing through the passage opening to entering the first entrance opening and the second entrance opening is notified by the notification operation. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball passes through the passing port, a discriminating means for discriminating whether the passing game ball is to be distributed to the first entrance port or the second entrance port by the distribution means. And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode in which a judgment result by the discriminating means can be determined.

  As a result, the player can know in advance which of the first entrance and the second entrance can be assigned a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily predict future game development.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows a correspondence relationship between a first random number counter C1 and a special symbol big hit determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table, and (d) is a second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol hit determination value. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship of FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol 1. (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol 2. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a variable and a variation type. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of a reserved symbol and an effect symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of normal, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a distribution unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a ball into a ball entrance, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time when a ball entry judgment period has elapsed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which showed special symbol 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the preceding winning a prize detection processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the preceding winning a prize production processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect when the ball entry judgment period passes during a fluctuation period (replacement possible). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect when the entrance judgment period passes during a fluctuation | variation period (it cannot replace). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a ball into the distribution unit, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of elapse of the ball entry determination period, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect after the elapse of the ball entry judgment period. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous change process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the inside of the distribution unit 640. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 includes a gaming board 13 (see FIG. 1) having a number of nails, winning holes 63, a sorting unit 640 having a right-side second ball opening 64b2, a first ball opening 64a, and a second ball opening 64b. 2) is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64a, which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. For example, every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “the city stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” → .... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes" or a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Will be As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64 a, the sorting unit 640, the second right entrance 64 b 2, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64a, the second opening 64b, 64b2 inside the distribution unit 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed through the base plate 60 by the router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball is moved to the second entrance 64b, 64b2. When the ball is entered, a lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery in the case of the first special symbol jackpot and the case of the second special symbol jackpot. In the case of the first special symbol jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”. In the case of the jackpot of the second special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C” (FIGS. 10A to 10B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened the number of times according to the jackpot type. Further, after the end of the special game state, a game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player as an added value after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has been hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the motorized accessory attached to the right second entrance 64b2 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the right second entrance 64b2. It becomes easy to do. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the right second entrance opening 64b2, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, three types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" are provided.

  When the "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C" are reached, the special game state of the number of rounds according to each big hit type is established. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and the big hit game The special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times later in the time-saving game state (the period in which the special symbol has a low probability and the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory is long, and the number of times of opening is frequently set). 100 times are set as the period until the operation is completed. The "big hit B" is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the big hit game, the probability variation game state where the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( 100 times (high-probability gaming state) (number of times the special symbol fluctuates) are given. The "big hit C" is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 positive change games are given after the big hit game. It is to be noted that “big hit A” and “big hit B” are also provided with a normal symbol time-saving game state during the probability change game. The "big hit A" and "big hit B" are set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of one round elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. , "Big hit C" is set for one second in the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a miss, a small hit different from a big hit is set with a predetermined probability. When the small hit is won, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set to 1 second or until 10 game balls enter, as in the case of "big hit C". As described above, it is difficult for the player to discriminate “big hit C” and “small hit” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the "big hit C" and the "small hit" are notified in a state where the main symbol of "341" is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (chance eye), the player can use the special symbol (the third symbol). Pattern) is difficult to identify. In addition, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display that is difficult to identify to the player by the LED or 7-segment display, and is configured such that the jackpot type is difficult to be distinguished. I have.

  In addition, since the time saving game is not set after the "big hit C" and the "small hit", it is difficult to determine whether the game is "big hit C" or "small hit" in the subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player has the "small hit", the "big hit C" is executed, and the player can play the game with expectation that the gaming state is set to the certain-variable gaming state. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game in a period until “big hits A to C” is executed.

  Here, the "special symbol probable change game state (high probability state)" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol probable change). It is a state of a game that easily transitions to a gaming state. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the “high probability state” is referred to as the “special symbol normal game state (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability change state, ie, the special symbol Indicates that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of a special symbol). The “normal symbol time-saving state” (normal symbol time-saving time) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric accessory is provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is likely to be changed to a state in which the ball is guided to the second entrance 64b (an inverted C-shape (see FIG. 2)), and a ball is easily entered into the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the time-saving period of the normal symbol and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type becomes “big jackpot A”, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues after the “big jackpot A” is completed until the special symbol lottery ends three times. After the end of the special symbol lottery finishes six times until the special symbol lottery finishes. When the "big hit C" is reached, the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the "big hit C" ends. May be continued.

  Further, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time for opening the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the second entrance 64b or opening the motorized accessory for one hit of the normal symbol is opened. The number of times may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ". Instead of the number of special symbol lotteries, the normal symbol time reduction state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3A and 3B are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on this front side, and the cover body is made of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that the inside becomes difficult to see.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 640, a passing port through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmission type ball entry sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passing port is arranged. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b disposed therebelow.

  The sorting member 900 receives the game ball that has entered the ball at the accommodation portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the storage section 640a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 34A) due to the weight of the game ball, and causes the game ball to enter the first entrance. 64a. Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing 900a and the housing 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 640, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage of the magnet 901b of the distribution member 900. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have mutually repelling polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is configured by a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end faces the distribution member 900 side.

  The magnet 900 b is also formed of a bar-shaped magnet similarly to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 such that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is positioned at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located right above (on the center line of the space where the passing game balls can enter by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is closest to each other (tips are opposed to each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the magnets do not stop at a position where the boundary wall of the rebounding / sorting member 900 faces directly upward. , Is maintained at a position rotated left or right.

  Accordingly, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 so that the distribution member 900 is moved to the left or right. It rotates, and either the accommodation part 900a or the accommodation part 900b faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the sorting unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entered game ball from abutting on the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b, thereby preventing the ball from being clogged.

  Also, by the repulsion of the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation unit 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from turning right (the housing unit 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the accommodation unit 900b is in a state of facing upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the accommodation unit 900b and played. The sorting member 900 is rotated to the right by about 180 degrees due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, game balls can be evenly distributed to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a game) resulting from a prize to the first entrance 64a described later. The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter, the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance from which the lottery of the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters, similarly to the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is four including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage opening of the sorting unit 640 (a size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second ball entrance 64b2 is configured so that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state where the housing 900a is rotated to a position facing upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is housed in the housing portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight to be guided by the guide portion z1 to the first ball entrance. A game ball is guided to 64a.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the accommodation portion 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 3B. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage, it is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to alternately sort the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”. When the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state”, the state is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times from the end of the special symbol jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, after the big hit is completed and before the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, if the special symbol big hit is not newly obtained, the process returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly created while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, the "special symbol high probability state" is further changed to a special symbol after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. Is repeated until the lottery is completed 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “special symbol high probability state”, when the second special symbol lottery becomes a new jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” further includes the new special symbol lottery. It continues from the end of the jackpot until a special symbol lottery is performed 12 times. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries between the two special symbol lotteries performed before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lotteries performed after the new jackpot are completed. The "high probability state of special symbol" will be continued.

  In addition, when the special symbol hits and shifts from the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the special symbol jackpot. Continued until On the other hand, if a new special symbol jackpot does not occur after the special symbol jackpot has been won by the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries, the process returns to the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”.

  Then, if the special symbol jackpot is newly added while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, the "ordinary symbol time saving state" is further changed after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the "normal symbol time-saving state", when the fifth special symbol lottery becomes a new jackpot, the "normal symbol time-saving state" further, the new jackpot After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed eight times. That is, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the “normal symbol time reduction state” is continued, each time the special symbol jackpot type is changed according to the new special symbol jackpot type (“ The duration of the "normal symbol time-saving state" is updated.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry ports 64b, 64b2 is being executed. As a result, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry is displayed. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the mouths 64b and 64b2, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the ball enters the second entrances 64b, 64b2, the number of entered balls is maximum. The number of retained balls is held up to four times, and the number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrances 64b and 64b2 are each configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of times held is four. However, the number is not limited to three times (for example, two times), or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is displayed.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a change of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, there is a possibility that all the numbers from “0” to “9” are prepared regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big hit in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big hit. I have. In order to effectively perform this pseudo interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type based on the type of the main symbol displayed in the case of a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, there is a possibility that all the numbers from “0” to “9” are aligned regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big hit in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big hit. I have. In order to effectively perform this pseudo interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type based on the type of the main symbol displayed in the case of a jackpot. In the case of the big hit C, a chance eye constituted by a random eye of “341” is displayed. In the present embodiment, one type of chance is “341”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another type of chance may be used. Good.

  The fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the change of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set for the game state. You.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of big hits are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. The ratio of the jackpot that shifts to the high-probability gaming state is 80% for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, which are the same.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set to be easier to select a jackpot which is advantageous to the player than the second special symbol. Here, since the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are alternately won by the distribution unit 640, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. Is done.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a prize from being biased toward one of the winning openings, and to prevent the damage to the player from becoming excessive, and the damage to the game store to be excessive, It is configured to be able to suppress the problem that the performance is significantly increased. In addition, since the frequency of occurrence of so-called over-winning can be reduced by winning beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by winning one of the winning openings, even though a ball enters the entrance, The player's dissatisfaction due to not winning can be reduced, and the player stops emitting balls each time the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the turnover rate of the game becomes worse, so that the sales at the game store will not increase Can be prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower part is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the other upper part is a holding ball. The sub-display area Ds displays a number and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2. Of these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. This is an area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on entering the distribution unit 640 are displayed, and in the small area Ds2, the reserved symbol of the special symbol 2 is held. A holding symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on entering the distribution unit 640 are displayed.

  Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the sorting unit 640, the entering ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 640a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 900 in the sorting unit 640. Is displayed. After that, when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a “white circle symbol (see FIG. 5A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as a “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 5A)”, and the rendering symbol is displayed as a “white square symbol (see FIG. 5A)”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the holding symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol in the display area of the number of held balls, and based on the ball entering the distribution unit 640, the integrated symbol is displayed. Since a part of the effect symbol is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved symbol is being displayed based on the fact that the player entered the distribution unit 640.

  In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, a character appears. . In addition, the player may be suggested to be in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the holding ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball which entered into the 1st ball entrance 64a or the 2nd ball entrance 64b, 64b2 may be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of retaining balls is four. The number is not limited, and may be set to three times or less (for example, two times) or five or more times (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each area includes a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Each value is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64a. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrances 64b and 64b2. Then, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a includes a first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability. Are different in the number of jackpot random numbers included in the table. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability of special symbols are provided by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second entrances 64b and 64b2.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number which is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 2" are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table 202a (see FIG. 8B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of the random numbers is 3; therefore, the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random number values which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 29” are stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability case (FIG. ) See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of the random number values is 30 out of the total number of random numbers of 400, and thus the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes "big hit A". When the value is “20 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, when the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Is "big hit A". When the value is “20 to 59”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot C”.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203. The ball is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrances 64b and 64b2.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”. In the low-probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuating time refers to the time from the start of the change of the special symbol until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds has been executed, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is determined, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as Based on the variation time, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 9A).

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D), for example, as the variation pattern for the departure, "departure (for a long time)", "departure (for a short time)", "departure normal reach" "Various types", "Large Super Reach" various types, "Lost Special Reach" various types, and "Variable Normal Reach" types, "Super Super Reach" types, and "Special Special Reach" types are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpots. I have. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). The variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d is, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  At the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a positive variation counter 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a counter buffer 203i, a variation execution flag 203j, and a variation order storage area 203k. , And a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special symbol 1 is selected in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64a (start winning), and as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning, winning information including those values is obtained. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp controlling device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The special symbol 2 retaining ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first symbol opening 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol is changed to the second entrance 64b (the second special symbol), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that other data is stored in the same manner as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the holding area having the area number one smaller than the winning data stored in the holding area. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64a. This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value of the ball is increased to eight. One is added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol 2 N2) is reserved. The sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S213 in FIG. 17, and S605 and S612 in FIG. 21). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 executes the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in the device 110 can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S805 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S706 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 23: No).

  The probable changing counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable changing state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol) or not. Indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the value of the probable changing counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability changing counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a closes (ie, the timing of ending the jackpot) in the final round of the jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the in-progress variable counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuation effect ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 18) or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process, the value of the probable changing counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol 1 is changed based on the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. While the symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a closes (that is, the timing of ending the jackpot) in the last round of the jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuation effect ends, until the value of the counter 203h during working hours is reduced to 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for the low probability time (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 22).

  As described above, the counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The change execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is changed with priority or the second special symbol is changed with priority. Note that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is cut off, and in the initial state after the RAM is cleared, the first special symbol is set with priority.

  The change order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the change order storage area 203k, and the order is stored in the preceding storage area in the order of winning. The storage area is also shifted based on the start of the change of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with the ROM 202 which stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 includes at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. I have.

  As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number which is the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a includes a table (a first random number table 202a for a low probability) and a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. There is provided a table (first random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. I have. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The small hit determination value is set in the first random number table 202a for high probability at "30 to 39". On the other hand, the small hit determination value is not set in the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Thereby, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small hit from being established, and it becomes easy to recognize that the winning of the two rounds is the small hit. Can be suppressed. In addition, during the working hours of the probable change game state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win the big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win the small hit, it is possible to set the big hit C or the small hit. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a hit, and it is possible to make the player play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. . As shown in FIG. 9C, the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 10A) dedicated to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And an application selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 10B).

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are each set to be selectable, and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is set as the jackpot A determination value. “0 to 19” is set as “20 to 99” as the jackpot B determination value. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set such that the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C are each selectable. The value “0 to 19” of the counter C2 is set to “20 to 59” as the determination value of the big hit B, and “60 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit C.

  The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol (during the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5-28. In the case of, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. , The electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol hit. As described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. , The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9D) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and defines the display mode for each value of the variation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9D, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a special jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B) when the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, and a hit / fail determination. The result is out of range, and if the game is in the normal game state, the special (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C) is used. Each of them includes at least a user (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D). In addition, although not shown, a variation pattern selection table for the time reduction game state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out award balls one by one. More specifically, each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, such as during a big hit, it is possible to suppress the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls without a break, and prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to the melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to a touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a portion touched by the player such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), thereby causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the payout suspension period until the payout of the prize balls by the payout motor 216 are stopped are not limited to those described above, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the pause period may be set to 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a fluctuation pattern effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern table. Since the variation pattern table is already known, it will be briefly described. However, based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110, the rough variation content (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command is based on the variation pattern command. (Reach, departure, etc.)). As a result, various variations can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a change start flag 223d. , Stop type selection flag 223e, preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g, special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h, and special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i. Is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). Each of these areas has a counter C1 to C3 as winning information. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64a, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1610 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter after storage. In order to notify the value of 223 b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second entrances 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol). The only difference is that the one entrance 64a (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command is set. The set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop effect of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The leading special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball passes through a passage opening when the distribution member 900 is oriented in a direction of distributing the game ball to the first entrance 64a.

  The leading special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 900 is directed in the direction of distributing the game ball to the second entrance, with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, the difference is that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 preceding prize flag 223h is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening when the distribution member 900 is oriented in the direction distributed to the first entrance 64a. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the first entrance 64a after the game ball has passed through the passage opening. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a for three seconds after the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on, the first entrance 64a is not entered. It can be determined that the sheet is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 is oriented in the direction of being sorted to the second ball entrance 64b. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether a game ball has entered the second entrance 64b after the game ball has passed through the passage opening. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second entrance 64b even if three seconds elapse after the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is turned on, the second entrance 64b is not entered and the ball is not entered. It can be determined that the sheet is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, a display mode of a reserved symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the ball passes through the passage (ball entry sensor 640a) of the sorting unit 640 and enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 13A is a timing chart in a case where the game ball passes through the passage and then enters the first ball entrance 64a before the ball entry determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols "white square symbol" indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage opening are displayed, and two "white circle symbols" which are the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 14). Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, when the sorting member 900 is in a state where it can be sorted to the first entrance 64a in a state in which the accommodation portion 900a faces upward. Displays a “white square symbol” at a position in the free area of the small area Ds <b> 1 that has the lowest winning order (see FIG. 14B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64a within 3 seconds, a "white circle symbol" which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the "white square symbol" (FIG. 15 (a)). )reference). When a white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is hidden.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol in a state where the white symbol is displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the effect from the display of the effect symbol to the display of the white circle symbol as the effect of displaying the reserved symbol. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the holding of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce a sense of incongruity due to a time difference until the ball actually enters the first entrance 64a.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode in a case where the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a after the ball enters the passage and the entrance judgment period elapses. When the distribution member 900 is oriented to distribute to the first entrance at the timing of entering the passage, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an effect symbol is additionally displayed in the small area Ds1. I do. Thereafter, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entry judgment period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the effect symbol is not displayed as shown in FIG. Set.

  In this way, by hiding the effect symbol at the timing when the ball entry determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the player has not entered the first ball entry port 64a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the accurate number of the reserved balls.

  Note that when a game ball passes through the passage opening in a state where the distribution member 900 faces the position where the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 640b, a rendering symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. You. In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  The position of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time by the entrance of the ball. . Specifically, based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64a, the sorting member 900 is configured to determine that the housing portion 900c is facing upward. With this configuration, the position of the distribution member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Further, even if the distribution member 900 is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time the ball enters the entrance every time.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start prize process is executed in accordance with a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of suspensions N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a determination is made as to whether the change is to be performed with the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2, and a variable execution determination process of setting the variable execution flag 203j is performed (S204). The change execution determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j set by the variation execution determination process is variation execution (1) in Toku-zu 1 (S205), and if it is not variation execution (1) in Toku-zu 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210). If the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2, (S210) If the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special design 1 reserved ball is performed for the special design 2 reserved ball. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. 2 A change start process is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 19 or a special symbol 2 change start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, a stop symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, in the case of the special symbol 1 big hit, it is determined whether the big hit A, the big hit B, or the big hit C according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. In the case of the big hit of the symbol 2, it is determined whether the big hit A or the big hit B is made according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is displayed as a special symbol. It is determined whether it is a symbol jackpot (S218). Then, if the result of the current lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the positive variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S220). When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the in-progress changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the in-progress variable counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is determined to be greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the time reduction counter 203h is determined. Is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the processing of S224 executed after the processing of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217, and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to tune the fluctuation stop (S224).

  Next, the variable execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is determined based on the values of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data of the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203k toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → suspended third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to the variable execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S305). Then, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (2) (S306). If it is determined in the processing of S306 that the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (2) (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S307), and this processing is performed. And returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 2 (2) (S306: No), there is no pending ball to be changed, and thus the process is executed while the change execution flag 203j is in the initial state. And returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 change start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S209). This special symbol 1 change start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is executed in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is being changed (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability is changing, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability is not changing. In the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability is being changed (S402: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the high probability of the first random number table 202a (S403). ), And proceeds to the processing of S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the large hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 29", it is determined that the hit is a big hit, and if it is in the range of "30 to 399", it is determined that the hit is out (see FIG. 9B). ).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability in the first random number table 202a. Then (S404), the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the big hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S404). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined that the hit is a small hit. Is determined to be out of the range (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S403 or S404 is a jackpot. When it is determined that the lottery result obtained in the processing of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405: Yes), the selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S401. The display mode is set more (S407), and the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S408).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 It determines what the jackpot type is among the jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) of the special symbols. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined to be the big hit A (15R ordinary big hit), and if it is in the range of “20 to 59”, the big hit is determined. It is determined to be B (15R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot) (see FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S408). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S408, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the large symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, in the case of a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “51 to 179”. , "180 to 198", a special reach (90 seconds) variation pattern is obtained (see FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of the out-of-spec symbol is set (S409). In the process of S409, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, “reach out of front and rear”, “reach other than front and rear out”, “perfect out” and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. Determine the time. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). More specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98” if the value is completely out of the range of “0 to 98”, the value is short (7 seconds), and if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", it is super reach (60 seconds). Second), and “198” indicates special reach (90 seconds).

  When the processing of S407 or S410 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S407 or S410 is set (S411). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S410 is set (S412). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 26). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S412 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the special symbol 2 change start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (S214). This special symbol 2 change start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 change start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 change start process (S209), the first random number counter C1 of the special symbol 2 obtained by the process of S501 and the first random number counter C1 of the first random number table 202a. The lottery result is obtained based on the determination value of the random number table 202a. In the process of S502, when it is determined that the probability is being changed (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the high probability in the first random number table 202a ( In S503), when it is determined that the probability is not being changed (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Thereafter, a winning information command including the lottery result is set (S505), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S506).

  If it is determined in the processing of S506 that the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S506: Yes), the display mode of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S501. (S507).

  The specific content is the first symbol display according to the determined jackpot type (small jackpot A, big jackpot B), similar to the setting of the jackpot display mode (S407) in the special symbol 1 change start process (S209). The display mode of the device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type. In the present embodiment, the processing of S507 is set using the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 which is different from the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 used in the setting of the special jackpot 1 display mode (S407). However, the setting may be performed using the same table.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S506 that the special symbol 2 has been removed (S506: No), a display mode of the removal is set (S509). The specific content is the same as the setting (S409) of the display mode of the deviation from the special symbol 1 change start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S510), and the process proceeds to S511.

  When the processing of S508 or S510 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S508 or S510 is set (S511). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S507 or S509 is set (S512). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 26). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S512 ends, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, it is determined. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol based on the holding processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is obtained (S606), and the flow proceeds to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. The special figure 1 (1) is set (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set, if the value is 3, the third area is set, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the change order storage area 203k in the change execution determination processing (S204) described above, the starting symbol that changes the special symbol 1 as in the present embodiment and the special symbol 2 are changed. Even when there are two kinds of fluctuations, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the winning opening is won.

  In the processing of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 64b (S608). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S608: Yes), the same processing as that in the case where the first entrance 64 is won is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) ( (S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained (S613), the special figure 2 (2) is set in the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k (S614), and this processing ends. The determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S609.

  If there is no prize in the second entrance 64b (S608: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than four. If not (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203h of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S708). The time reduction counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. This indicates that the symbol is in the time reduction state, and if the value of the counter 203h during the time reduction is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol.

  If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol big hit (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 is prevented from entering the ball during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made such that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the current symbol is a special symbol. It is determined whether a big hit is in progress (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary design (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719). If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0 (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the first pass is performed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1012 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1012 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1005: Yes), S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) and the start winning process (see FIG. 21), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 19), and the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 20) ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. The setting of the end of the jackpot includes the setting of the start of the special fluctuation period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in a round other than the last round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. , In the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, The variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at S1112 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). The jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is being hit (S1201). Specifically, the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1201, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1201: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S 1101) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), the processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all rounds of the jackpot have been completed) (S1207).

  If it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and the value corresponding to the various hits after the big hit is set to various counters. It is set (S1209). That is, by setting the counter 203h during the time reduction to 100, the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (time reduction state) from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. After setting the various counter values, the present process ends.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and the present process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1418 (see FIG. 29). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 29), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1418 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the flow shifts to S1308.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1418, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1418 (see S1417 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1418 is executed, the process starting at S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1309), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1308 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S1308 is performed via the processes of steps S1304 to S1306. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process skips S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1310, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1311), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1304 to the process of S1308 via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1402 to S1411 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the pseudo continuous variation process in S1413, and the variation display setting process in S1414 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, it is possible to detect the incoming ball by the incoming ball sensor 640a. Can be set without delay, and the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, so that the setting of the variable effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. .

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on the reserved lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing ends, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, in the preceding winning detection processing (S1411), a preceding winning effect processing for performing an effect based on the detection of the incoming ball by the entering sensor 640a is executed (S1413). The details of the preceding prize production process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1414). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off processing is executed (S1418). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the preceding winning detection processing (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning detection processing (S1411). This preceding winning detection processing (S1411) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, a winning effect corresponding to the predicted first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is executed.

  In the preceding winning detection processing (S1411), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the entrance through the entrance sensor 640a (S1501). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S1502), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted whether the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. As a method of predicting a winning destination, a sensor (not shown) mounted on the axis of the sorting member 900 for detecting the tilt calculates the direction of the sorting member 900 from the tilt. Note that the detection of the orientation of the sorting member 900 for predicting the winning destination may not be performed by a sensor that detects inclination, but may be performed by using, for example, a magnet and a hall sensor. In addition, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternately left and right as described above, the prize destination may be predicted based on the number of prizes, in which case the sensor is not required. Can be.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance through the processing of S1502 (S1503). If it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S1503: No) , To S1509. On the other hand, when the ball is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 suspension number counter is acquired (S1504). It is determined whether the acquired value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved number counter (SN1) is less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, less than 4) (S1505). If not (S1505: No), S1506 Steps S1508 to S1508 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reservation number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1505: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1 (S1506). Thereafter, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on (S1507), a special figure 1 preceding winning effect command for display is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  The winning sound is output in the sound editing / outputting process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 29) in the audio lamp control device based on the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S1507. Thereby, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the 640 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b where the player cannot visually recognize the winning is provided. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player as compared with the related art in which the winning sound is output at the timing of winning the crab. In addition, by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command set by the processing of S1508, a ball enters 640 where the player can visually recognize the effect (see FIG. 14B) as if the reserved symbol was turned on. Since it can be executed at the timing of balling, compared to the conventional game in which the reserved symbol is lit at the timing of winning one of the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b in which the player cannot visually recognize the winning, It is possible to reduce a player's discomfort.

  The sound output here is continuously output until the sound enters the first entrance hole 64a. If the ball does not enter the first entrance hole 64a, the ball is stopped based on the flag being turned off after the elapse of 3 seconds of the entry judgment period.

  After the processing of S1503, S1505 or S1508, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the second entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1509), and it is predicted that the ball does not enter the second entrance. If (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when the ball is predicted to win the second entrance (S1509: Yes), the same processing as that when the ball is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503 to S1508) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is acquired (S1510), and the acquired value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is less than a predetermined number of times (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) Is determined (S1511), and if not less than the predetermined number of times (S1511: No), the processing of S1512 to S1514 is skipped, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1511: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1 (S1512), and the special figure 2 The prize-winning flag 223i is turned on (S1513), a special figure 2 display prize-winning effect command for display is set (S1514), and the process ends.

  Next, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1412), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern is read from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). If the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1607). Then, when the pending ball count command is received (S1607: Yes), a pending ball count command receiving process is executed (S1608), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the pending ball count command receiving process (S1608) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command receiving process (S1608). In this reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not the received reserved ball number command is the reserved symbol number command of the special symbol 1 (S1701). When the received reserved ball number command is determined to be the special symbol 1 (S1701: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value of 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702). Then, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set (S1703).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1702 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. At the time of drawing a special symbol or a special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the process of S1703 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S1704), and the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is acquired is the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter. It is determined whether the number is larger than the number (S1705). When it is determined that the number of times N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter (S1705: Yes), the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is determined. The value (SN1) is changed to the number of suspensions N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 (S1706), and the process shifts to S1707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is not greater than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 holding ball number counter (SN1), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process of S1707 is performed. Move to.

  In the processing of S1707, it is within a predetermined time period (within 3 seconds in this embodiment) since the special figure 1 preceding prize winning flag 223h is turned on (1), and the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is acquired. It is determined whether the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter (SN1) is the same value (S1707). If the determination in S1707 is true, the special figure 1 preceding prize flag is set to off (0) (S1708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in S1707 is false, the process in S1708 is skipped, and this process ends. Here, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to ON (1) based on the detection of the entering ball by the entering sensor 640a in the preceding winning detection process (S1411) of the main process (FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device. Then, the leading special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. The winning number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is added by the main controller by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and is transmitted as a reserved ball number command. The number of times N1 of the display is retained matches the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter. Therefore, by receiving the number-of-retained-balls command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 preceding winning flag is turned on (1), the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 and the acquired preceding special figure 1 are acquired. If the value (SN1) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter matches, it is determined that there has been a prize in the first ball entrance 64 after the ball is detected by the ball input sensor 640a, and the special figure 1 preceding prize flag is turned off (0). Set. If this special figure 1 preceding prize winning flag is not set to off (0) within a predetermined period after the detection of a ball entry, it is determined that the first ball entry port 64 has not been won after the ball entry sensor 640a detects a ball entry. Can be.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received number-of-balls command is not the special symbol 1 (S1701: No), the same processing as the processing of S1702 to S1708 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S1709 to S1715). The details of the processing are the same as in the description of S1702 to S1708, and will not be repeated.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1607, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). When the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted from the received command as winning information and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1610). Return to processing. In the process of S1610, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S1609, if the winning information command has not been received (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1611). When the round number command is received (S1611: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1612), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1612). S1613), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1611, if the round number command has not been received (S1611: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1614), and returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. The command is set so as to be transmitted to. Specific examples of other commands include, for example, the above-described opening start command.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the precedent winning effect process (S1413). This variable display setting processing (S1413) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the irrespective of the detection of the ball entry by the ball entry sensor 640a, In order to change the display of the pseudo-holding symbol when the first entrance or the second entrance is not won, a display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command or a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is generated. And set.

  In the prize winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 prize winning flag 223h was turned on (1) (S1801). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h was turned on (1) (S1801: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S1802). Then, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command is set (S1804), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: No), the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start (S1805). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i was turned on (1) (S1805: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g (S1806). Then, the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S1808), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1414). This variable display setting process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S1907. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then, in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), the change pattern is set. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After the data is shifted, the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S1906), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1907.

  In the processing of S1907, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1907: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1908), and then, in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1909).

  Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911.

  In the process of S1910, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1911). Then, the present process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage, the sound that can identify that the passed game ball is sorted (in the first entrance 64a, the sound effect of “Peey” At the second ball entrance 64b, a sound effect called "Boon" is output. Thus, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b will enter the ball at the timing when the game ball passes through the entrance.

  Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, even when the game pattern is not displayed at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass, the timing at which the game ball passes through the pass and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance Discomfort due to the time difference with the time can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball has passed through the passage opening, it is determined to which entrance opening the game ball is to be distributed, a rendering symbol is displayed at a corresponding position, and then the rendering symbol is displayed. , And the player can feel as if the number of reserved balls is increasing at the timing of passing through the passage opening. Therefore, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same symbols for holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols and the holding symbols are combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbols and the holding symbols may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to the effect design in which the drop drops at the timing of passing through the passage is displayed, and then the image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the ball entry determination period, and the first ball entrance 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the droplets and the droplet may not be displayed. When the ball does not enter the entrance, the display mode of the droplet is not displayed without displaying the character. Thus, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can expect to see whether the fairy is displayed or not and can play the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the effect symbols are displayed based on the detection of the ball entry into the distribution unit 640 by the ball entry sensor 640a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the entry into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. Thereby, it is possible to give an impression to the player as if a reserved symbol is being displayed based on the ball entering the distribution unit 640. If there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection (if the ball has entered the sorting unit but has not won), once The rendered effect symbols are hidden.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, based on the detection of the incoming ball to the distribution unit 640 by the incoming ball sensor 640a, a small area corresponding to a pseudo reserved symbol that is a symbol for artificially suggesting the number of reserved balls is provided. Ds1 and Ds2 are displayed. The reserved symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is displayed in a small area Ds3 which is an area at the lower left of the main display area Dm, and the player can determine the number of retained elements. The identification information that is difficult to recognize is displayed (see FIGS. 37A to 37C). (In the present embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when two balls are retained, “C” when three balls are retained, and “D” when four balls are retained. Yes.)
If there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection, a pseudo-holding symbol once displayed is hidden when it is hidden. By performing the variable display, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player when the pseudo hold symbol is not displayed.

  This is because a pseudo-holding symbol displayed on the basis of the ball entering the distribution unit 640 is not displayed for a player who has an impression as if the symbol is a holding symbol (that is, the pseudo-holding symbol is not displayed). This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when it appears that one reserved ball has been digested.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 is included in the main processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The difference is that the section processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, processes executed by the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, a description will be given of a display of a reserved symbol and a pseudo reserved symbol and a variable display in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a period (replaceable period) in which the fluctuating display can be artificially stopped and restarted during the fluctuating period (replaceable period) is determined in advance for each fluctuating pattern.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a case where it is determined that there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection during the replacement period during the fluctuation period. It is. Specifically, in the case where there are two pseudo reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1, when a ball is entered into the sorting unit 640a and the entered ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 640a, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The number of pseudo reserved symbols changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). Thereafter, when it is determined that there is no winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the entry judgment period a in the replaceable period, a pseudo stop display is displayed and the next stop is displayed. Is displayed, and a pseudo continuous change notice (pseudo continuous notice) indicating that a continuous effect is performed is displayed (see FIG. 37B). After that, the display of the pseudo reserved symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo variable display is started (FIG. 37 (c)). When the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, the display of the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol is changed to one state, and the variable display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 36 shows that, during a period that is not the above-described replaceable period during the change period (non-replaceable period), the first or second entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within a predetermined period after the detection of the incoming ball. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no ball entry. In this case, the pseudo display is executed before the next display to be executed, whereby the display based on the pseudo reserved symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, in the case where there are two pseudo reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1, when a ball is entered into the sorting unit 640a and the entered ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 640a, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The number of pseudo reserved symbols changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). Thereafter, in the non-replacement period of the fluctuation period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance judgment period a, the ongoing variable display is continued. Is done. After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variable display is stopped, the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol are subtracted by one and the display is changed to one state, and the variable display based on the winning information of the reservation of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) indicating that the next fluctuation display and a continuous effect are performed is displayed. You may.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol that have entered the passing opening are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the pseudo reserved symbol as a symbol that is easy for the player to understand, and displaying the reserved symbol as a symbol that is difficult to identify to the player, the player can recognize the pseudo reserved symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo reserved symbols are added and displayed at the timing of passing through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort due to a time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, when a game ball that has passed through the passage does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, the first entrance does not pass through the entrance. When the ball enters the second entrance 64b or the second entrance 64b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, when the game ball that has passed through the passage does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, the number of pseudo reserved symbols is larger than the actual reserved symbols. By executing the change with the special symbol, the pseudo reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, the difference can be eliminated. Further, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b without passing through the passing port, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo reserved symbol according to the reserved symbol.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  In this main processing, in each processing of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419, the same processing as the processing of each of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. In the main process according to the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is executed instead of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the above-described pseudo continuous fluctuation processing (S1420) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation processing (S1420). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is performed when the ball is not entered into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 65b, despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect in which a pseudo reservation symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is consumed and a fluctuation effect is performed based on the ball entry detection by 640a.

  Pseudo consecutive change process, first, determines whether the special symbol 1 prior winning flag or special symbol 2 prior winning flag has elapsed a predetermined time period from when an ON (1) (S2301). If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag or the special figure 2 preceding winning flag is turned on (1) (S2301: Yes), the ball detection by the ball sensor 640a is not performed. Despite the fact that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b, pseudo continuous variation start processing is executed (S2302), and this processing ends.

  Here, the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302). This pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302) is performed when the ball does not enter the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 65b despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. This is a process for starting a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect in which a pseudo-holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is consumed and a fluctuation effect is performed based on ball-in detection by the ball-in sensor 640a.

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is ON (1) (S2401). When it is determined that the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is not on (1) (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2409 as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is on (1) (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to off (0) (S2402). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are acquired (S2404), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than that (S2404). When it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: No), the process proceeds to S2409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball is retained. The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the stop symbol replacement period is available (S2406).

  If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement period is available (S2406: Yes), a display pseudo stop type command, a display pseudo variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command are sequentially set (S2407). ). The fluctuation display is pseudo stop-displayed by the display pseudo stop type command set here (see FIG. 37 (b)), and a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is started by the display pseudo fluctuation pattern command (FIG. 37 ( c)), the display of the pseudo-hold symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command (see FIG. 37 (c)). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is determined because the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 65b does not enter the ball despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. When (N1) does not match the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be seen that the pseudo reserved symbol based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is consumed and a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is performed. When correcting a mismatch between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command are sequentially set (S2408). A pseudo continuous fluctuation effect which is executed by consuming the pseudo-holding symbol as the next fluctuation effect is set by the display pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern command set here, and the pseudo-holding symbol of the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is set as the next fluctuation effect that consumes and executes the pseudo-holding symbol, so that the player can feel a sense of incongruity in the next fluctuation effect while maintaining a special feeling. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S2409 executed after the processing of S2401, S2404, S2407 or S2408, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is on (1) (S2409). When it is determined that the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is ON (1) (S2409: Yes), the same processing as that of the special figure 1 described above is performed for the special figure 2 (S2410 to S2416), and the special figure 2 preceding If it is determined that the winning flag 223i is not on (1) (S2409: No), the processing of S2410 to S2416 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding prize flag or the special figure 2 preceding prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is determined whether or not has elapsed (S2303). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (S2303: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (S2303: Yes), a pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process for determining a mode of stopping the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (S2304). .

  Here, the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing (S2304). The pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S2304) is a process for determining the mode of stopping the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing, first, it is determined whether or not continuous fluctuation is suspended (S2501). If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the continuous fluctuation is suspended (S2501: Yes), the display stop type command is set with the pseudo continuous fluctuation display stop symbol (S2502). Thereby, a continuous variable effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variable effect in which the variable effect is started and the variable effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous fluctuation is not suspended (S2501: No), the display stop type command is set with the stop symbol of the normal fluctuation display (S2503). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous fluctuation display is not started even though the stop symbol of the continuous fluctuation display is displayed.

  Note that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage, the sound that can identify that the passed game ball is sorted (in the first entrance 64a, the sound effect of “Peey” At the second ball entrance 64b, a sound effect called "Boon" is output. Thus, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b will enter the ball at the timing when the game ball passes through the entrance.

  Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, even when the game pattern is not displayed at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass, the timing at which the game ball passes through the pass and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance Discomfort due to the time difference with the time can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball has passed through the passage opening, it is determined to which entrance opening the game ball is to be distributed, a rendering symbol is displayed at a corresponding position, and then the rendering symbol is displayed. , And the player can feel as if the number of reserved balls is increasing at the timing of passing through the passage opening. Therefore, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same symbols for holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols and the holding symbols are combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbols and the holding symbols may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to the effect design in which the drop drops at the timing of passing through the passage is displayed, and then the image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the ball entry determination period, and the first ball entrance 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the droplets and the droplet may not be displayed. When the ball does not enter the entrance, the display mode of the droplet is not displayed without displaying the character. Thus, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can expect to see whether the fairy is displayed or not and can play the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of the pseudo reserved symbols is larger than the number of the reserved symbols, it is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation is possible in the fluctuation pattern during the fluctuation. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the switchable period predetermined in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, if a pseudo variation is possible, it can be quickly eliminated. In addition, when it is out of the switchable period, since the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the subsequent fluctuations, it is possible to suppress a problem that the difference continues for a long time.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting a continuous notice performed in the fluctuation mode of the pseudo fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern of a hit, the player increases the expectation of the big hit when the pseudo fluctuation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabets, which is difficult to determine, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar may be displayed and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a difference in the length. In addition, the display of the reserved symbol may not be performed at all by the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo reserved symbol is the real reserved number. In this case, by notifying the holding symbol by a frame lamp or the like (for example, arranging an accessory of cherry blossom petals and lighting the number of the petals), it is difficult for the player to understand, but the real holding is performed. The number can be reported.

  It should be noted that a pachinko machine combining some or all of the above-described embodiments may be used.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A Group> (Play a prize sound when winning 8 chances)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, A storage unit capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and indicates a storage number of each based on the fact that the first information or the second information is stored in the storage unit. Identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means, Based on the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed, based on the display of the identification information, a bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, A passage having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of passing the passage through the passage and distributing the game ball alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance. A notifying unit for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, a storage unit capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, based on that the first information or the second information is stored in the storage unit , Identification for displaying on the display means an identification symbol indicating the number of storages Pattern display means, based on the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, privilege game providing means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, And a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening can be alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. It has a distribution means and a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening. Thereby, the notification mode is notified by passing through the passage opening, so that a sense of incongruity due to a time difference from passing through the passage opening to entering the first entrance opening and the second entrance opening is notified by the notification operation. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passing port, it is determined whether the passing game ball is distributed to the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determining unit, wherein the notifying unit notifies a notification mode in which a determination result by the determining unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when a game ball passes through the passing port, a discriminating means for discriminating whether the passing game ball is to be distributed to the first entrance port or the second entrance port by the distribution means. And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode in which a judgment result by the discriminating means can be determined. As a result, the player can know in advance which of the first entrance and the second entrance can be assigned a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily predict future game development.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on a game ball passing through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notification means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage, so that the player can easily play the game. Has the effect that it can be determined that the vehicle has passed through the passage opening.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notifying unit notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passing port. The notification mode that is notified when a game ball has passed is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port after the game ball passes through the passage opening. Gaming machine A4, which is notified by the length of the game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notifying unit is configured to perform a predetermined operation when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode is notified when the game ball passes through the passing port, and the notification mode is notified when the game ball passes through the passing port and the first ball port or the second ball port. Since the game ball is notified with a length equal to or longer than the time required for the ball to enter, the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing of passing through the passage. Can be made to remind the player as follows. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Temporary reserved symbols are displayed at winning timing)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, On the basis of that the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; In a gaming machine having a game ball, a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening are alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on that the game ball has passed through the passing port, and that the first ball port and the second ball port are Discriminating means for discriminating to which one, a first notifying means for notifying a first notifying mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a game ball at the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second notification unit that changes the first notification mode based on the entry of a ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Grant bonus games that are advantageous to the player based on A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passport is alternately arranged between the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on the game ball having passed through the passing port, and the first ball entry port and the second ball entry ball are distributed by the sorting means. Determination means for determining which of the two is to be distributed to the mouth, first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the entry of a game ball. Thereby, in the first notification mode that is notified by passing through the passing port and in the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port by entering the passing port. The player can be made to think as if he / she has entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort due to the time difference between the timing at which the player enters the passage and the timing at which the player enters the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification mode even if the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. In this case, the gaming machine B2 sets the first notification mode to the non-information mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the first notification means, when notifying the first notification mode, outputs the second notification even if the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. When the notification is not changed to the second notification mode by the notification means, the first notification mode is set to the non-report mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passing port enters the first or second ball input port. This has the effect that the player can be made aware of the fact that he did not do so.

<Character C group> (Pseudo hold design and main hold design are displayed respectively)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, On the basis of that the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; In a gaming machine having a game ball, a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening are alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on that the game ball has passed through the passing port, and that the first ball port and the second ball port are Determining means for determining which order is to be sorted, and decorative pattern display means for displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative pattern display means, Based on the satisfaction of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit is hidden, and the dynamic display unit includes Based on the fulfillment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a first entrance where game balls can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball enters the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Grant bonus games that are advantageous to the player based on A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passport is alternately arranged between the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on the game ball having passed through the passing port, and the first ball entry port and the second ball entry ball are distributed by the sorting means. A determining means for determining whether the order is assigned to the mouth or the mouth, and a decorative symbol displaying means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means; The means, based on the establishment of the start condition, for hiding the decorative symbol displayed first among the decorative symbols displayed on the display means, the dynamic display means , Based on establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can be notified that the ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance with the decorative design. Therefore, discomfort due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the starting condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize whether the start condition is satisfied. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first ball entrance or the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second ball entrance displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C3 comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference between the number of the first information and the number of the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first ball entrance or the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second ball entrance displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. Since it has a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference between the number of the first information or the second information, it is determined whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference discriminating means determines whether or not the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance after the game ball passes through the passage opening is longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. A gaming machine C4 for determining the difference based on the passage of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the difference discriminating means determines whether the gaming ball is to be inserted into the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage opening. Since the difference is determined based on the lapse of a reference time equal to or longer than the time required to enter the mouth, the game ball that has passed through the passage is the first entrance or the second entrance. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determination means determines the difference based on a game ball having entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined, it is possible to determine whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. In the case of having a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information being dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information When the start condition is set by the condition setting means in the case of the game machine, the display is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5. That is, when it is determined by the difference determination unit that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit, the dynamic display is performed. Having a condition setting means for setting the start condition within a dynamic display time of the identification information, wherein the dynamic display means is provided by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, the dynamic display is started again after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the numbers of the first information and the second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means displays the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determining means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decorative symbol corresponding to the smaller number of the first information or the second information is additionally displayed by a difference number, and the gaming machine C7 is characterized by the above-mentioned. .

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First ball entrance 64b Second ball entrance 81 Third symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (part of dynamic display means)
203 RAM (storage means)
640a Passage S105 Information acquisition means S203 Part of dynamic display execution means S402 Part of lottery means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a prize is notified by outputting a prize sound or the like based on a prize of a game medium to a ball entrance, and whether or not the prize is determined.

For the purpose of distributing the stream of game media to the in-spheres port, it has been proposed that introduction flow path for introducing the game medium to the incoming ball port is provided.

JP 2012-231902 A

However, there has been a problem that the player feels a sense of incompatibility with the notification of the prize, for example , when the notification of the prize is shifted due to the rolling of the game ball in the introduction flow path .

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a player's discomfort.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first ball entry means and the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball configured to detect the entered game ball. A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means , and obtains first information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means , and based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. acquisition means for acquiring second information Te, triggered by the establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for performing determination based on the acquired first information or the second information by the acquisition unit, due to the determining means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result on a display means, and storage capable of storing the first information and the second information at least until the determination condition is satisfied Means and the first information or the second information in the storage means. If the broadcast is stored, an identification symbol display means for displaying the number of identification symbols corresponding to each of the count storage of said first information stored as the second information in the storage unit on the display unit , when the identification information for indicating that the determination result by the determining means is a particular judgment result is displayed, it has a benefits game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and Passing means having an opening through which a game ball can enter; guiding means capable of guiding a game ball passing through the opening to the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means; An effect symbol display means capable of displaying an effect symbol on the display means based on the passing of the game ball through the opening, and based on the detection of the game ball entering the first ball entry means. And displaying the first identification symbol on the display means. First identification symbol display means that can be displayed, and a second identification symbol can be displayed on the display means based on detection of a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means. A second identification symbol display means, wherein the effect symbol is displayed when the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol is displayed within a predetermined period after the game ball passes through the opening. The displayed first identification symbol or the second identification symbol and the effect symbol are displayed together, and the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol is not displayed on the display means, When a predetermined period has elapsed, the displayed effect symbols are configured to be hidden, and the effect symbols are configured to be displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode. Is what it is .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first ball entry means configured to be able to detect the game ball entered and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. a ball entrance means, the game balls to the first ball entrance means acquires first information based on that ball entrance, the second information based on the game ball to the second ball entrance unit has ball entrance obtaining means for obtaining, in response to establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for performing determination based on the acquired first information or the second information by the acquisition unit, for indicating the determination result by the determination unit Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and storage thereof. If the first information or the second information is stored in the unit To an identification symbol display means for displaying on said display means the number of identification symbols corresponding to each of the count storage of said first information stored as the second information in the storage unit, the determination by the determining means A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the result is a specific determination result is displayed, and the game ball can be entered. Passing means having a simple opening, guiding means capable of guiding a game ball passing through the opening to the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and a game ball passing through the opening. An effect symbol display means capable of displaying an effect symbol on the display means based on passing, and a first identification symbol based on detection of a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. May be displayed on the display means. Capable first identification symbol display means, and a second identification symbol capable of displaying a second identification symbol on the display means based on detection of a game ball entering the second ball entry means. Display means, and the effect symbol is displayed when the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol is displayed within a predetermined period after a game ball passes through the opening. The first identification symbol or the second identification symbol and the effect symbol are displayed together, and the predetermined period elapses without displaying the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol on the display means. In this case, the displayed effect symbol is configured to be hidden, and the effect symbol is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period in a predetermined dynamic display mode. .

Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a distribution unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows a correspondence relationship between a first random number counter C1 and a special symbol big hit determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table, and (d) is a second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol hit determination value. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship of FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol 1. (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol 2. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a variable and a variation type. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of a reserved symbol and an effect symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of normal, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a distribution unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a ball into a ball entrance, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time when a ball entry judgment period has elapsed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which showed special symbol 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the preceding winning a prize detection processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the preceding winning a prize production processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect when the ball entry judgment period passes during a fluctuation period (replacement possible). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect when the entrance judgment period passes during a fluctuation | variation period (it cannot replace). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of entering a ball into the distribution unit, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of elapse of the ball entry determination period, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect after the elapse of the ball entry judgment period. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous change process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the inside of the distribution unit 640. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 includes a gaming board 13 (see FIG. 1) having a number of nails, winning holes 63, a sorting unit 640 having a right-side second ball opening 64b2, a first ball opening 64a, and a second ball opening 64b. 2) is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64a, which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. For example, every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “the city stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” → .... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes" or a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Will be As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64 a, the sorting unit 640, the second right entrance 64 b 2, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64a, the second opening 64b, 64b2 inside the distribution unit 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed through the base plate 60 by the router processing. It is disposed in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball is moved to the second entrance 64b, 64b2. When the ball is entered, a lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. A lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) It is released and the release is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As will be described in detail later, the special symbol jackpot is determined by a dedicated lottery in the case of the first special symbol jackpot and the case of the second special symbol jackpot. In the case of the first special symbol jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”. In the case of the jackpot of the second special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from the three types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, and “jackpot C” (FIGS. 10A to 10B). reference). The specific winning opening 65a is opened the number of times according to the jackpot type. Further, after the end of the special game state, a game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player as an added value after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has been hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the motorized accessory attached to the right second entrance 64b2 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the right second entrance 64b2. It becomes easy to do. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the right second entrance opening 64b2, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, three types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" are provided.

  When the "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C" are reached, the special game state of the number of rounds according to each big hit type is established. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, specifically, the “big hit A” is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened 15 times, and the big hit game The special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times later in the time-saving game state (the period in which the special symbol has a low probability and the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory is long, and the number of times of opening is frequently set). 100 times are set as the period until the operation is completed. The "big hit B" is a big hit (15R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened 15 times, and after the big hit game, the probability variation game state where the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability ( 100 times (high-probability gaming state) (number of times the special symbol fluctuates) are given. The "big hit C" is a big hit (2R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened twice, and 100 positive change games are given after the big hit game. It is to be noted that “big hit A” and “big hit B” are also provided with a normal symbol time-saving game state during the probability change game. The "big hit A" and "big hit B" are set until the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of one round elapses for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. , "Big hit C" is set for one second in the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or until 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a miss, a small hit different from a big hit is set with a predetermined probability. When the small hit is won, the specific winning opening 65a is opened twice. The opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for one round of the specific winning opening 65a is set to 1 second or until 10 game balls enter, as in the case of "big hit C". As described above, it is difficult for the player to discriminate “big hit C” and “small hit” from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the "big hit C" and the "small hit" are notified in a state where the main symbol of "341" is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (chance eye), the player can use the special symbol (the third symbol). Pattern) is difficult to identify. In addition, the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display that is difficult to identify to the player by the LED or 7-segment display, and is configured such that the jackpot type is difficult to be distinguished. I have.

  In addition, since the time saving game is not set after the "big hit C" and the "small hit", it is difficult to determine whether the game is "big hit C" or "small hit" in the subsequent games. Thereby, even if the player has the "small hit", the "big hit C" is executed, and the player can play the game with expectation that the gaming state is set to the certain-variable gaming state. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game in a period until “big hits A to C” is executed.

  Here, the "special symbol probable change game state (high probability state)" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol probable change). It is a state of a game that easily transitions to a gaming state. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the “high probability state” is referred to as the “special symbol normal game state (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability change state, ie, the special symbol Indicates that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of a special symbol). The “normal symbol time-saving state” (normal symbol time-saving time) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the Riu electric accessory is provided along with the second entrance 64b. Is likely to be changed to a state in which the ball is guided to the second entrance 64b (an inverted C-shape (see FIG. 2)), and a ball is easily entered into the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the time-saving period of the normal symbol and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type becomes “big jackpot A”, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues after the “big jackpot A” is completed until the special symbol lottery ends three times. After the end of the special symbol lottery finishes six times until the special symbol lottery finishes. When the "big hit C" is reached, the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the "big hit C" ends. May be continued.

  Further, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time for opening the motorized accessory (not shown) attached to the second entrance 64b or opening the motorized accessory for one hit of the normal symbol is opened. The number of times may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ". Instead of the number of special symbol lotteries, the normal symbol time reduction state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3A and 3B are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 640. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on this front side, and the cover body is made of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that the inside becomes difficult to see.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 640, a passing port through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmission type ball entry sensor 640a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passing port is arranged. . The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b disposed therebelow.

  The sorting member 900 receives the game ball that has entered the ball at the accommodation portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the storage section 640a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 34A) due to the weight of the game ball, and causes the game ball to enter the first entrance. 64a. Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing 900a and the housing 900b.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 640, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage of the magnet 901b of the distribution member 900. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have mutually repelling polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is configured by a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end faces the distribution member 900 side.

  The magnet 900 b is also formed of a bar-shaped magnet similarly to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 such that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is positioned at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located right above (on the center line of the space where the passing game balls can enter by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is closest to each other (tips are opposed to each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the magnets do not stop at a position where the boundary wall of the rebounding / sorting member 900 faces directly upward. , Is maintained at a position rotated left or right.

  Accordingly, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 so that the distribution member 900 is moved to the left or right. It rotates, and either the accommodation part 900a or the accommodation part 900b faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the sorting unit 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entered game ball from abutting on the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b, thereby preventing the ball from being clogged.

  Also, by the repulsion of the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation unit 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from turning right (the housing unit 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the accommodation unit 900b is in a state of facing upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting unit 640 is received by the accommodation unit 900b and played. The sorting member 900 is rotated to the right by about 180 degrees due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance 64b. As described above, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution unit 640 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Therefore, game balls can be evenly distributed to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a game) resulting from a prize to the first entrance 64a described later. The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter, the second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second entrance 64b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second entrance 64b2 is an entrance from which the lottery of the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters, similarly to the second entrance 64b. In the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is four including the second entrance 64b and the right second entrance 64b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage opening of the sorting unit 640 (a size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second ball entrance 64b2 is configured so that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped in a state where the housing 900a is rotated to a position facing upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the game ball is housed in the housing portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight to be guided by the guide portion z1 to the first ball entrance. A game ball is guided to 64a.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the accommodation portion 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 3B. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage, it is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to alternately sort the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”. When the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state”, the state is maintained until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times from the end of the special symbol jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, after the big hit is completed and before the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, if the special symbol big hit is not newly obtained, the process returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly created while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, the "special symbol high probability state" is further changed to a special symbol after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. Is repeated until the lottery is completed 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “special symbol high probability state”, when the second special symbol lottery becomes a new jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” further includes the new special symbol lottery. It continues from the end of the jackpot until a special symbol lottery is performed 12 times. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries between the two special symbol lotteries performed before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lotteries performed after the new jackpot are completed. The "high probability state of special symbol" will be continued.

  In addition, when the special symbol hits and shifts from the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the special symbol jackpot. Continued until On the other hand, if a new special symbol jackpot does not occur after the special symbol jackpot has been won by the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries, the process returns to the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”.

  Then, if the special symbol jackpot is newly added while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, the "ordinary symbol time saving state" is further changed after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the "normal symbol time-saving state", when the fifth special symbol lottery becomes a new jackpot, the "normal symbol time-saving state" further, the new jackpot After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed eight times. That is, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the “normal symbol time reduction state” is continued, each time the special symbol jackpot type is changed according to the new special symbol jackpot type (“ The duration of the "normal symbol time-saving state" is updated.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry ports 64b, 64b2 is being executed. As a result, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry is displayed. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the mouths 64b and 64b2, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the ball enters the second entrances 64b, 64b2, the number of entered balls is maximum. The number of retained balls is held up to four times, and the number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrances 64b and 64b2 are each configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of times held is four. However, the number is not limited to three times (for example, two times), or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is displayed.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a change of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, there is a possibility that all the numbers from “0” to “9” are prepared regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big hit in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big hit. I have. In order to effectively perform this pseudo interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type based on the type of the main symbol displayed in the case of a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, there is a possibility that all the numbers from “0” to “9” are aligned regardless of the jackpot type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds during the big hit in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the big hit. I have. In order to effectively perform this pseudo interval effect, it is configured such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type based on the type of the main symbol displayed in the case of a jackpot. In the case of the big hit C, a chance eye constituted by a random eye of “341” is displayed. In the present embodiment, one type of chance is “341”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another type of chance may be used. Good.

  The fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the change of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set for the game state. You.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of big hits are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. The ratio of the jackpot that shifts to the high-probability gaming state is 80% for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, which are the same.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set to be easier to select a jackpot which is advantageous to the player than the second special symbol. Here, since the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b are alternately won by the distribution unit 640, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. Is done.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a prize from being biased toward one of the winning openings, and to prevent the damage to the player from becoming excessive, and the damage to the game store to be excessive, It is configured to be able to suppress the problem that the performance is significantly increased. In addition, since the frequency of occurrence of so-called over-winning can be reduced by winning beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by winning one of the winning openings, even though a ball enters the entrance, The player's dissatisfaction due to not winning can be reduced, and the player stops emitting balls each time the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the turnover rate of the game becomes worse, so that the sales at the game store will not increase Can be prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower part is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the other upper part is a holding ball. The sub-display area Ds displays a number and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2. Of these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are reserved balls that are the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance port 64a or the second entrance port 64b. This is an area for displaying numbers. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on entering the distribution unit 640 are displayed, and in the small area Ds2, the reserved symbol of the special symbol 2 is held. A holding symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on entering the distribution unit 640 are displayed.

  Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the sorting unit 640, the entering ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 640a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 900 in the sorting unit 640. Is displayed. After that, when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a “white circle symbol (see FIG. 5A)” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as a “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 5A)”, and the rendering symbol is displayed as a “white square symbol (see FIG. 5A)”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the holding symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol in the display area of the number of held balls, and based on the ball entering the distribution unit 640, the integrated symbol is displayed. Since a part of the effect symbol is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved symbol is being displayed based on the fact that the player entered the distribution unit 640.

  In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, a character appears. . In addition, the player may be suggested to be in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the holding ball of the second entrance 64b is set in the same manner as the first entrance 64a.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball which entered into the 1st ball entrance 64a or the 2nd ball entrance 64b, 64b2 may be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of retaining balls is four. The number is not limited, and may be set to three times or less (for example, two times) or five or more times (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each area includes a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 64b2. Each value is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64a. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrances 64b and 64b2. Then, the value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a includes a first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability. Are different in the number of jackpot random numbers included in the table. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability of special symbols are provided by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second entrances 64b and 64b2.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number which is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 2" are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table 202a (see FIG. 8B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of the random numbers is 3; therefore, the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random number values which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 29” are stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability case (FIG. ) See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of the random number values is 30 out of the total number of random numbers of 400, and thus the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). As shown in FIG. 9A, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes "big hit A". When the value is “20 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, when the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Is "big hit A". When the value is “20 to 59”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot C”.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203. The ball is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrances 64b and 64b2.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”. In the low-probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuating time refers to the time from the start of the change of the special symbol until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds has been executed, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is determined, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as Based on the variation time, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 9A).

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D), for example, as the variation pattern for the departure, "departure (for a long time)", "departure (for a short time)", "departure normal reach" "Various types", "Large Super Reach" various types, "Lost Special Reach" various types, and "Variable Normal Reach" types, "Super Super Reach" types, and "Special Special Reach" types are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpots. I have. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). The variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds specified in the variation pattern selection table 202d is, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  At the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a positive variation counter 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a counter buffer 203i, a variation execution flag 203j, and a variation order storage area 203k. , And a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special symbol 1 is selected in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64a (start winning), and as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning, winning information including those values is obtained. The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp controlling device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The special symbol 2 retaining ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second entrance 64b (second special symbol), and the first symbol opening 64a ( The only difference is that the first special symbol is changed to the second entrance 64b (the second special symbol), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that other data is stored in the same manner as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the holding area having the area number one smaller than the winning data stored in the holding area. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64a. This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value of the ball is increased to eight. One is added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol 2 N2) is reserved. The sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S213 in FIG. 17, and S605 and S612 in FIG. 21). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 executes the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in the device 110 can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls to be changed, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the actual deviated display shows a deviation from the held ball count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S805 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S706 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 23: No).

  The probable changing counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable changing state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol) or not. Indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the value of the probable changing counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability changing counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a closes (ie, the timing of ending the jackpot) in the final round of the jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the in-progress variable counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuation effect ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 18) or the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 19) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process, the value of the probable changing counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the special symbol 1 is changed based on the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. While the symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a closes (that is, the timing of ending the jackpot) in the last round of the jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuation effect ends, until the value of the counter 203h during working hours is reduced to 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for the low probability time (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 22).

  As described above, the counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The change execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is changed with priority or the second special symbol is changed with priority. Note that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is cut off, and in the initial state after the RAM is cleared, the first special symbol is set with priority.

  The change order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the change order storage area 203k, and the order is stored in the preceding storage area in the order of winning. The storage area is also shifted based on the start of the change of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with the ROM 202 which stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 includes at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. I have.

  As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number which is the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a includes a table (a first random number table 202a for a low probability) and a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. There is provided a table (first random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. I have. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The small hit determination value is set in the first random number table 202a for high probability at "30 to 39". On the other hand, the small hit determination value is not set in the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  Thereby, in the normal gaming state in which the first special symbol is preferentially changed, it is possible to prevent the small hit from being established, and it becomes easy to recognize that the winning of the two rounds is the small hit. Can be suppressed. In addition, during the working hours of the probable change game state in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed, it is easy to win the big hit C. Therefore, by setting to win the small hit, it is possible to set the big hit C or the small hit. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a hit, and it is possible to make the player play for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. . As shown in FIG. 9C, the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 10A) dedicated to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And an application selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 10B).

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are each set to be selectable, and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is set as the jackpot A determination value. “0 to 19” is set as “20 to 99” as the jackpot B determination value. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set such that the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C are each selectable. The value “0 to 19” of the counter C2 is set to “20 to 59” as the determination value of the big hit B, and “60 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit C.

  The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol (during the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5-28. In the case of, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. , The electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol hit. As described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. , The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9D) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and defines the display mode for each value of the variation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9D, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a special jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B) when the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, and a hit / fail determination. The result is out of range, and if the game is in the normal game state, the special (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C) is used. Each of them includes at least a user (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D). In addition, although not shown, a variation pattern selection table for the time reduction game state is set.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out award balls one by one. More specifically, each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, such as during a big hit, it is possible to suppress the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls without a break, and prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to the melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to a touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a portion touched by the player such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), thereby causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the payout suspension period until the payout of the prize balls by the payout motor 216 are stopped are not limited to those described above, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the pause period may be set to 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a fluctuation pattern effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern table. Since the variation pattern table is already known, it will be briefly described. However, based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110, the rough variation content (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command is based on the variation pattern command. (Reach, departure, etc.)). As a result, various variations can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a change start flag 223d. , Stop type selection flag 223e, preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g, special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h, and special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i. Is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). Each of these areas has a counter C1 to C3 as winning information. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64a, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1610 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter after storage. In order to notify the value of 223 b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second entrances 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol). The only difference is that the one entrance 64a (first special symbol) is changed to the second entrance 64b, 64b2 (second special symbol), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command is set. The set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop effect of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The leading special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball passes through a passage opening when the distribution member 900 is oriented in a direction of distributing the game ball to the first entrance 64a.

  The leading special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 900 is directed in the direction of distributing the game ball to the second entrance, with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, the difference is that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 preceding prize flag 223h is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening when the distribution member 900 is oriented in the direction distributed to the first entrance 64a. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the first entrance 64a after the game ball has passed through the passage opening. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a for three seconds after the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on, the first entrance 64a is not entered. It can be determined that the sheet is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 900 is oriented in the direction of being sorted to the second ball entrance 64b. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether a game ball has entered the second entrance 64b after the game ball has passed through the passage opening. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second entrance 64b even if three seconds elapse after the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is turned on, the second entrance 64b is not entered and the ball is not entered. It can be determined that the sheet is discharged out of the sorting unit 640.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, a display mode of a reserved symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the ball passes through the passage (ball entry sensor 640a) of the sorting unit 640 and enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 13A is a timing chart in a case where the game ball passes through the passage and then enters the first ball entrance 64a before the ball entry determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols "white square symbol" indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage opening are displayed, and two "white circle symbols" which are the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 14). Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, when the sorting member 900 is in a state where it can be sorted to the first entrance 64a in a state in which the accommodation portion 900a faces upward. Displays a “white square symbol” at a position in the free area of the small area Ds <b> 1 that has the lowest winning order (see FIG. 14B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64a within 3 seconds, a "white circle symbol" which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the "white square symbol" (FIG. 15 (a)). )reference). When a white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is hidden.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol in a state where the white symbol is displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the effect from the display of the effect symbol to the display of the white circle symbol as the effect of displaying the reserved symbol. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the holding of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce a sense of incongruity due to a time difference until the ball actually enters the first entrance 64a.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode in a case where the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a after the ball enters the passage and the entrance judgment period elapses. When the distribution member 900 is oriented to distribute to the first entrance at the timing of entering the passage, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an effect symbol is additionally displayed in the small area Ds1. I do. Thereafter, if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64a even after the entry judgment period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the effect symbol is not displayed as shown in FIG. Set.

  In this way, by hiding the effect symbol at the timing when the ball entry determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the player has not entered the first ball entry port 64a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the accurate number of the reserved balls.

  Note that when a game ball passes through the passage opening in a state where the distribution member 900 faces the position where the game ball is distributed to the second entrance 640b, a rendering symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. You. In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  The position of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time by the entrance of the ball. . Specifically, based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64a, the sorting member 900 is configured to determine that the housing portion 900c is facing upward. With this configuration, the position of the distribution member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Further, even if the distribution member 900 is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time the ball enters the entrance every time.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start prize process is executed in accordance with a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of suspensions N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a determination is made as to whether the change is to be performed with the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2, and a variable execution determination process of setting the variable execution flag 203j is performed (S204). The change execution determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j set by the variation execution determination process is variation execution (1) in Toku-zu 1 (S205), and if it is not variation execution (1) in Toku-zu 1 (S205: No) ), It is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210). If the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. .

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variation execution flag 203j is not the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution (2) in the special figure 2, (S210) If the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution (2) in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special design 1 reserved ball is performed for the special design 2 reserved ball. Do.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. 2 A change start process is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 19 or a special symbol 2 change start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, a stop symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set. More specifically, in the case of the special symbol 1 big hit, it is determined whether the big hit A, the big hit B, or the big hit C according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. In the case of the big hit of the symbol 2, it is determined whether the big hit A or the big hit B is made according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is displayed as a special symbol. It is determined whether it is a symbol jackpot (S218). Then, if the result of the current lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the positive variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S220). When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the in-progress changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the in-progress variable counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is determined to be greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the time reduction counter 203h is determined. Is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the processing of S224 executed after the processing of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217, and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to tune the fluctuation stop (S224).

  Next, the variable execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is determined based on the values of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data of the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203k toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → suspended third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to the variable execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S305). Then, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (2) (S306). If it is determined in the processing of S306 that the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (2) (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S307), and this processing is performed. And returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 2 (2) (S306: No), there is no pending ball to be changed, and thus the process is executed while the change execution flag 203j is in the initial state. And returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 change start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S209). This special symbol 1 change start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is executed in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter of the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is being changed (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability is changing, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability is not changing. In the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability is being changed (S402: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the high probability of the first random number table 202a (S403). ), And proceeds to the processing of S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the large hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 29", it is determined that the hit is a big hit, and if it is in the range of "30 to 399", it is determined that the hit is out (see FIG. 9B). ).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability in the first random number table 202a. Then (S404), the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S106 and the big hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S404). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that the hit is a big hit, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined that the hit is a small hit. Is determined to be out of the range (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S403 or S404 is a jackpot. When it is determined that the lottery result obtained in the processing of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405: Yes), the selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1 based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S401. The display mode is set more (S407), and the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S408).

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 It determines what the jackpot type is among the jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) of the special symbols. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined to be the big hit A (15R ordinary big hit), and if it is in the range of “20 to 59”, the big hit is determined. It is determined to be B (15R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot) (see FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S408). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S408, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the large symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). Specifically, in the case of a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “51 to 179”. , "180 to 198", a special reach (90 seconds) variation pattern is obtained (see FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of the out-of-spec symbol is set (S409). In the process of S409, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, “reach out of front and rear”, “reach other than front and rear out”, “perfect out” and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202d1 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is obtained. Determine the time. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 11A to 11D). More specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98” if the value is completely out of the range of “0 to 98”, the value is short (7 seconds), and if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", it is super reach (60 seconds). Second), and “198” indicates special reach (90 seconds).

  When the processing of S407 or S410 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S407 or S410 is set (S411). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S407 or S410 is set (S412). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 26). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S412 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the special symbol 2 change start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (S214). This special symbol 2 change start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 change start process, similarly to the special symbol 1 change start process (S209), the first random number counter C1 of the special symbol 2 obtained by the process of S501 and the first random number counter C1 of the first random number table 202a. The lottery result is obtained based on the determination value of the random number table 202a. In the process of S502, when it is determined that the probability is being changed (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the high probability in the first random number table 202a ( In S503), when it is determined that the probability is not being changed (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Thereafter, a winning information command including the lottery result is set (S505), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S506).

  If it is determined in the processing of S506 that the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S506: Yes), the display mode of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S501. (S507).

  The specific content is the first symbol display according to the determined jackpot type (small jackpot A, big jackpot B), similar to the setting of the jackpot display mode (S407) in the special symbol 1 change start process (S209). The display mode of the device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type. In the present embodiment, the processing of S507 is set using the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 which is different from the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 used in the setting of the special jackpot 1 display mode (S407). However, the setting may be performed using the same table.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S506 that the special symbol 2 has been removed (S506: No), a display mode of the removal is set (S509). The specific content is the same as the setting (S409) of the display mode of the deviation from the special symbol 1 change start process (S209).

  Next, a deviation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (S510), and the process proceeds to S511.

  When the processing of S508 or S510 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S508 or S510 is set (S511). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S507 or S509 is set (S512). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 26). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S512 ends, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, it is determined. This is a process for executing a pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol based on the holding processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is obtained (S606), and the flow proceeds to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. The special figure 1 (1) is set (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set, if the value is 3, the third area is set, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the change order storage area 203k in the change execution determination processing (S204) described above, the starting symbol that changes the special symbol 1 as in the present embodiment and the special symbol 2 are changed. Even when there are two kinds of fluctuations, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the winning opening is won.

  In the processing of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 64b (S608). If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64b (S608: Yes), the same processing as that in the case where the first entrance 64 is won is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) ( (S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, the value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained (S613), the special figure 2 (2) is set in the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k (S614), and this processing ends. The determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S609.

  If there is no prize in the second entrance 64b (S608: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than four. If not (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203h of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S708). The time reduction counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. This indicates that the symbol is in the time reduction state, and if the value of the counter 203h during the time reduction is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol.

  If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol big hit (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 is prevented from entering the ball during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9A).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made such that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the current symbol is a special symbol. It is determined whether a big hit is in progress (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary design (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719). If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0 (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the first pass is performed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1012 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1012 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1005: Yes), S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) and the start winning process (see FIG. 21), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 19), and the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 20) ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. The setting of the end of the jackpot includes the setting of the start of the special fluctuation period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in a round other than the last round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. , In the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 19) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, The variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at S1112 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). The jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is being hit (S1201). Specifically, the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1201, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1201: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S 1101) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), the processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all rounds of the jackpot have been completed) (S1207).

  If it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and the value corresponding to the various hits after the big hit is set to various counters. It is set (S1209). That is, by setting the counter 203h during the time reduction to 100, the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (time reduction state) from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. After setting the various counter values, the present process ends.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and the present process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1418 (see FIG. 29). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 29), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1418 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the flow shifts to S1308.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1418, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1418 (see S1417 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1418 is executed, the process starting at S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1309), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1308 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S1308 is performed via the processes of steps S1304 to S1306. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process skips S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1310, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1311), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1304 to the process of S1308 via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1402 to S1411 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the pseudo continuous variation process in S1413, and the variation display setting process in S1414 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, it is possible to detect the incoming ball by the incoming ball sensor 640a. Can be set without delay, and the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, so that the setting of the variable effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. .

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on the reserved lamps (Ds1, Ds2) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing ends, a lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1412). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, in the preceding winning detection processing (S1411), a preceding winning effect processing for performing an effect based on the detection of the incoming ball by the entering sensor 640a is executed (S1413). The details of the preceding prize production process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1414). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off processing is executed (S1418). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the preceding winning detection processing (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning detection processing (S1411). This preceding winning detection processing (S1411) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, a winning effect corresponding to the predicted first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is executed.

  In the preceding winning detection processing (S1411), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the entrance through the entrance sensor 640a (S1501). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S1502), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted whether the game ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. As a method of predicting a winning destination, a sensor (not shown) mounted on the axis of the sorting member 900 for detecting the tilt calculates the direction of the sorting member 900 from the tilt. Note that the detection of the orientation of the sorting member 900 for predicting the winning destination may not be performed by a sensor that detects inclination, but may be performed by using, for example, a magnet and a hall sensor. In addition, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternately left and right as described above, the prize destination may be predicted based on the number of prizes, in which case the sensor is not required. Can be.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance through the processing of S1502 (S1503). If it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S1503: No) , To S1509. On the other hand, when the ball is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 suspension number counter is acquired (S1504). It is determined whether the acquired value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved number counter (SN1) is less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, less than 4) (S1505). If not (S1505: No), S1506 Steps S1508 to S1508 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reservation number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1505: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1 (S1506). Thereafter, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on (S1507), a special figure 1 preceding winning effect command for display is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  The winning sound is output in the sound editing / outputting process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 29) in the audio lamp control device based on the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S1507. Thereby, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the 640 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b where the player cannot visually recognize the winning is provided. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player as compared with the related art in which the winning sound is output at the timing of winning the crab. In addition, by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command set by the processing of S1508, a ball enters 640 where the player can visually recognize the effect (see FIG. 14B) as if the reserved symbol was turned on. Since it can be executed at the timing of balling, compared to the conventional game in which the reserved symbol is lit at the timing of winning one of the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b in which the player cannot visually recognize the winning, It is possible to reduce a player's discomfort.

  The sound output here is continuously output until the sound enters the first entrance hole 64a. If the ball does not enter the first entrance hole 64a, the ball is stopped based on the flag being turned off after the elapse of 3 seconds of the entry judgment period.

  After the processing of S1503, S1505 or S1508, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the second entrance by the processing of S1502 (S1509), and it is predicted that the ball does not enter the second entrance. If (S1509: No), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when the ball is predicted to win the second entrance (S1509: Yes), the same processing as that when the ball is predicted to win the first entrance (S1503 to S1508) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is acquired (S1510), and the acquired value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is less than a predetermined number of times (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) Is determined (S1511), and if not less than the predetermined number of times (S1511: No), the processing of S1512 to S1514 is skipped, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is less than the predetermined number (S1511: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1 (S1512), and the special figure 2 The prize-winning flag 223i is turned on (S1513), a special figure 2 display prize-winning effect command for display is set (S1514), and the process ends.

  Next, the command determination process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1412). This command determination processing (S1412) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1412), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern is read from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1602), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1603), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). If the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1607). Then, when the pending ball count command is received (S1607: Yes), a pending ball count command receiving process is executed (S1608), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the pending ball count command receiving process (S1608) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command receiving process (S1608). In this reserved ball number command receiving process (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not the received reserved ball number command is the reserved symbol number command of the special symbol 1 (S1701). When the received reserved ball number command is determined to be the special symbol 1 (S1701: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value of 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702). Then, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set (S1703).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1702 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. At the time of drawing a special symbol or a special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the process of S1703 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S1704), and the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is acquired is the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter. It is determined whether the number is larger than the number (S1705). When it is determined that the number of times N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter (S1705: Yes), the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is determined. The value (SN1) is changed to the number of suspensions N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 (S1706), and the process shifts to S1707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is not greater than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 holding ball number counter (SN1), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process of S1707 is performed. Move to.

  In the processing of S1707, it is within a predetermined time period (within 3 seconds in this embodiment) since the special figure 1 preceding prize winning flag 223h is turned on (1), and the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is acquired. It is determined whether the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter (SN1) is the same value (S1707). If the determination in S1707 is true, the special figure 1 preceding prize flag is set to off (0) (S1708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in S1707 is false, the process in S1708 is skipped, and this process ends. Here, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to ON (1) based on the detection of the entering ball by the entering sensor 640a in the preceding winning detection process (S1411) of the main process (FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device. Then, the leading special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. The winning number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is added by the main controller by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and is transmitted as a reserved ball number command. The number of times N1 of the display is retained matches the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter. Therefore, by receiving the number-of-retained-balls command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 preceding winning flag is turned on (1), the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 and the acquired preceding special figure 1 are acquired. If the value (SN1) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter matches, it is determined that there has been a prize in the first ball entrance 64 after the ball is detected by the ball input sensor 640a, and the special figure 1 preceding prize flag is turned off (0). Set. If this special figure 1 preceding prize winning flag is not set to off (0) within a predetermined period after the detection of a ball entry, it is determined that the first ball entry port 64 has not been won after the ball entry sensor 640a detects a ball entry. Can be.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received number-of-balls command is not the special symbol 1 (S1701: No), the same processing as the processing of S1702 to S1708 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S1709 to S1715). The details of the processing are the same as in the description of S1702 to S1708, and will not be repeated.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1607, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). When the winning information command is received (S1609: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted from the received command as winning information and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1610). Return to processing. In the process of S1610, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S1609, if the winning information command has not been received (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1611). When the round number command is received (S1611: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1612), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1612). S1613), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1611, if the round number command has not been received (S1611: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1614), and returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. The command is set so as to be transmitted to. Specific examples of other commands include, for example, the above-described opening start command.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the precedent winning effect process (S1413). This variable display setting processing (S1413) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the irrespective of the detection of the ball entry by the ball entry sensor 640a, In order to change the display of the pseudo-holding symbol when the first entrance or the second entrance is not won, a display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command or a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is generated. And set.

  In the prize winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 prize winning flag 223h was turned on (1) (S1801). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h was turned on (1) (S1801: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S1802). Then, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command is set (S1804), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is turned on (1) (S1801: No), the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is turned on (1). It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start (S1805). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i was turned on (1) (S1805: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g (S1806). Then, the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is turned off (0). After that, the display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S1808), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is turned on (1) (S1805: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1414). This variable display setting process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S1907. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S1901: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S1902), and then, in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), the change pattern is set. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After the data is shifted, the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S1906), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1907.

  In the processing of S1907, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1907: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1907: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1908), and then, in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1909).

  Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911.

  In the process of S1910, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1911). Then, the present process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage, the sound that can identify that the passed game ball is sorted (in the first entrance 64a, the sound effect of “Peey” At the second ball entrance 64b, a sound effect called "Boon" is output. Thus, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b will enter the ball at the timing when the game ball passes through the entrance.

  Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, even when the game pattern is not displayed at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass, the timing at which the game ball passes through the pass and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance Discomfort due to the time difference with the time can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball has passed through the passage opening, it is determined to which entrance opening the game ball is to be distributed, a rendering symbol is displayed at a corresponding position, and then the rendering symbol is displayed. , And the player can feel as if the number of reserved balls is increasing at the timing of passing through the passage opening. Therefore, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same symbols for holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols and the holding symbols are combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbols and the holding symbols may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to the effect design in which the drop drops at the timing of passing through the passage is displayed, and then the image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the ball entry determination period, and the first ball entrance 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the droplets and the droplet may not be displayed. When the ball does not enter the entrance, the display mode of the droplet is not displayed without displaying the character. Thus, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can expect to see whether the fairy is displayed or not and can play the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the effect symbols are displayed based on the detection of the ball entry into the distribution unit 640 by the ball entry sensor 640a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the entry into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. Thereby, it is possible to give an impression to the player as if a reserved symbol is being displayed based on the ball entering the distribution unit 640. If there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection (if the ball has entered the sorting unit but has not won), once The rendered effect symbols are hidden.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, based on the detection of the incoming ball to the distribution unit 640 by the incoming ball sensor 640a, a small area corresponding to a pseudo reserved symbol that is a symbol for artificially suggesting the number of reserved balls is provided. Ds1 and Ds2 are displayed. The reserved symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is displayed in a small area Ds3 which is an area at the lower left of the main display area Dm, and the player can determine the number of retained elements. The identification information that is difficult to recognize is displayed (see FIGS. 37A to 37C). (In the present embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when two balls are retained, “C” when three balls are retained, and “D” when four balls are retained. Yes.)
If there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection, a pseudo-holding symbol once displayed is hidden when it is hidden. By performing the variable display, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player when the pseudo hold symbol is not displayed.

  This is because a pseudo-holding symbol displayed on the basis of the ball entering the distribution unit 640 is not displayed for a player who has an impression as if the symbol is a holding symbol (that is, the pseudo-holding symbol is not displayed). This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when it appears that one reserved ball has been digested.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 is included in the main processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The difference is that the section processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, processes executed by the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, a description will be given of a display of a reserved symbol and a pseudo reserved symbol and a variable display in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a period (replaceable period) in which the fluctuating display can be artificially stopped and restarted during the fluctuating period (replaceable period) is determined in advance for each fluctuating pattern.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a case where it is determined that there is no ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b within a predetermined period after ball entry detection during the replacement period during the fluctuation period. It is. Specifically, in the case where there are two pseudo reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1, when a ball is entered into the sorting unit 640a and the entered ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 640a, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The number of pseudo reserved symbols changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). Thereafter, when it is determined that there is no winning in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the entry judgment period a in the replaceable period, a pseudo stop display is displayed and the next stop is displayed. Is displayed, and a pseudo continuous change notice (pseudo continuous notice) indicating that a continuous effect is performed is displayed (see FIG. 37B). After that, the display of the pseudo reserved symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo variable display is started (FIG. 37 (c)). When the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, the display of the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol is changed to one state, and the variable display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 36 shows that, during a period that is not the above-described replaceable period during the change period (non-replaceable period), the first or second entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within a predetermined period after the detection of the incoming ball. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no ball entry. In this case, the pseudo display is executed before the next display to be executed, whereby the display based on the pseudo reserved symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, in the case where there are two pseudo reserved symbols and two reserved symbols for the special symbol 1, when a ball is entered into the sorting unit 640a and the entered ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 640a, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The number of pseudo reserved symbols changed to three (see FIG. 37 (a)). Thereafter, in the non-replacement period of the fluctuation period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b within the period of the entrance judgment period a, the ongoing variable display is continued. Is done. After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variable display is stopped, the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol are subtracted by one and the display is changed to one state, and the variable display based on the winning information of the reservation of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) indicating that the next fluctuation display and a continuous effect are performed is displayed. You may.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the pseudo reserved symbol and the reserved symbol that have entered the passing opening are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the pseudo reserved symbol as a symbol that is easy for the player to understand, and displaying the reserved symbol as a symbol that is difficult to identify to the player, the player can recognize the pseudo reserved symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo reserved symbols are added and displayed at the timing of passing through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort due to a time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, when a game ball that has passed through the passage does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, the first entrance does not pass through the entrance. When the ball enters the second entrance 64b or the second entrance 64b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, when the game ball that has passed through the passage does not enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, the number of pseudo reserved symbols is larger than the actual reserved symbols. By executing the change with the special symbol, the pseudo reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, the difference can be eliminated. Further, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b without passing through the passing port, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo reserved symbol according to the reserved symbol.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  In this main processing, in each processing of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419, the same processing as the processing of each of S1401 to S1412 and S1414 to S1419 in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. In the main process according to the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is executed instead of the preceding winning effect process (S1413) in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the above-described pseudo continuous fluctuation processing (S1420) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation processing (S1420). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1420) is performed when the ball is not entered into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 65b, despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect in which a pseudo reservation symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is consumed and a fluctuation effect is performed based on the ball entry detection by 640a.

  Pseudo consecutive change process, first, determines whether the special symbol 1 prior winning flag or special symbol 2 prior winning flag has elapsed a predetermined time period from when an ON (1) (S2301). If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding winning flag or the special figure 2 preceding winning flag is turned on (1) (S2301: Yes), the ball detection by the ball sensor 640a is not performed. Despite the fact that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 65b, pseudo continuous variation start processing is executed (S2302), and this processing ends.

  Here, the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302). This pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing (S2302) is performed when the ball does not enter the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 65b despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. This is a process for starting a pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect in which a pseudo-holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is consumed and a fluctuation effect is performed based on ball-in detection by the ball-in sensor 640a.

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is ON (1) (S2401). When it is determined that the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is not on (1) (S2401: No), the process proceeds to S2409 as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is on (1) (S2401: Yes), the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to off (0) (S2402). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are acquired (S2404), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than that (S2404). When it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: No), the process proceeds to S2409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S2404: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball is retained. The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the stop symbol replacement period is available (S2406).

  If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement period is available (S2406: Yes), a display pseudo stop type command, a display pseudo variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command are sequentially set (S2407). ). The fluctuation display is pseudo stop-displayed by the display pseudo stop type command set here (see FIG. 37 (b)), and a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is started by the display pseudo fluctuation pattern command (FIG. 37 ( c)), the display of the pseudo-hold symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command (see FIG. 37 (c)). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is determined because the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 65b does not enter the ball despite the fact that the ball entry sensor 640a detects the ball entry. When (N1) does not match the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be seen that the pseudo reserved symbol based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is consumed and a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is performed. When correcting a mismatch between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not the stop symbol replacement period (S2406: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command are sequentially set (S2408). A pseudo continuous fluctuation effect which is executed by consuming the pseudo-holding symbol as the next fluctuation effect is set by the display pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern command set here, and the pseudo-holding symbol of the pseudo-holding symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is set as the next fluctuation effect that consumes and executes the pseudo-holding symbol, so that the player can feel a sense of incongruity in the next fluctuation effect while maintaining a special feeling. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S2409 executed after the processing of S2401, S2404, S2407 or S2408, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 preceding prize flag 223i is on (1) (S2409). When it is determined that the special figure 2 preceding winning flag 223i is ON (1) (S2409: Yes), the same processing as that of the special figure 1 described above is performed for the special figure 2 (S2410 to S2416), and the special figure 2 preceding If it is determined that the winning flag 223i is not on (1) (S2409: No), the processing of S2410 to S2416 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 preceding prize flag or the special figure 2 preceding prize flag is turned on (1) (S2301: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is determined whether or not has elapsed (S2303). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (S2303: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (S2303: Yes), a pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process for determining a mode of stopping the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (S2304). .

  Here, the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing (S2304). The pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S2304) is a process for determining the mode of stopping the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous fluctuation stop processing, first, it is determined whether or not continuous fluctuation is suspended (S2501). If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the continuous fluctuation is suspended (S2501: Yes), the display stop type command is set with the pseudo continuous fluctuation display stop symbol (S2502). Thereby, a continuous variable effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variable effect in which the variable effect is started and the variable effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous fluctuation is not suspended (S2501: No), the display stop type command is set with the stop symbol of the normal fluctuation display (S2503). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous fluctuation display is not started even though the stop symbol of the continuous fluctuation display is displayed.

  Note that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage, the sound that can identify that the passed game ball is sorted (in the first entrance 64a, the sound effect of “Peey” At the second ball entrance 64b, a sound effect called "Boon" is output. Thus, it is possible to determine which of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b will enter the ball at the timing when the game ball passes through the entrance.

  Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, even when the game pattern is not displayed at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass, the timing at which the game ball passes through the pass and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance Discomfort due to the time difference with the time can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball has passed through the passage opening, it is determined to which entrance opening the game ball is to be distributed, a rendering symbol is displayed at a corresponding position, and then the rendering symbol is displayed. , And the player can feel as if the number of reserved balls is increasing at the timing of passing through the passage opening. Therefore, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same symbols for holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols and the holding symbols are combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbols and the holding symbols may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to the effect design in which the drop drops at the timing of passing through the passage is displayed, and then the image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the ball entry determination period, and the first ball entrance 64a or At the timing of entering the second entrance 64b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the droplets and the droplet may not be displayed. When the ball does not enter the entrance, the display mode of the droplet is not displayed without displaying the character. Thus, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can expect to see whether the fairy is displayed or not and can play the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of the pseudo reserved symbols is larger than the number of the reserved symbols, it is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation is possible in the fluctuation pattern during the fluctuation. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the switchable period predetermined in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, if a pseudo variation is possible, it can be quickly eliminated. In addition, when it is out of the switchable period, since the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the subsequent fluctuations, it is possible to suppress a problem that the difference continues for a long time.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting a continuous notice performed in the fluctuation mode of the pseudo fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern of a hit, the player increases the expectation of the big hit when the pseudo fluctuation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabets, which is difficult to determine, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar may be displayed and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a difference in the length. In addition, the display of the reserved symbol may not be performed at all by the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo reserved symbol is the real reserved number. In this case, by notifying the holding symbol by a frame lamp or the like (for example, arranging an accessory of cherry blossom petals and lighting the number of the petals), it is difficult for the player to understand, but the real holding is performed. The number can be reported.

  It should be noted that a pachinko machine combining some or all of the above-described embodiments may be used.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A Group> (Play a prize sound when winning 8 chances)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, A storage unit capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and indicates a storage number of each based on the fact that the first information or the second information is stored in the storage unit. Identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means, Based on the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed, based on the display of the identification information, a bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, A passage having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of passing the passage through the passage and distributing the game ball alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance. A notifying unit for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, a storage unit capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, based on that the first information or the second information is stored in the storage unit , Identification for displaying on the display means an identification symbol indicating the number of storages Pattern display means, based on the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, privilege game providing means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, And a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening can be alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. It has a distribution means and a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening. Thereby, the notification mode is notified by passing through the passage opening, so that a sense of incongruity due to a time difference from passing through the passage opening to entering the first entrance opening and the second entrance opening is notified by the notification operation. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passing port, it is determined whether the passing game ball is distributed to the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determining unit, wherein the notifying unit notifies a notification mode in which a determination result by the determining unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when a game ball passes through the passing port, a discriminating means for discriminating whether the passing game ball is to be distributed to the first entrance port or the second entrance port by the distribution means. And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode in which a judgment result by the discriminating means can be determined. As a result, the player can know in advance which of the first entrance and the second entrance can be assigned a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily predict future game development.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on a game ball passing through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notification means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage, so that the player can easily play the game. Has the effect that it can be determined that the vehicle has passed through the passage opening.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notifying unit notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passing port. The notification mode that is notified when a game ball has passed is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port after the game ball passes through the passage opening. Gaming machine A4, which is notified by the length of the game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notifying unit is configured to perform a predetermined operation when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode is notified when the game ball passes through the passing port, and the notification mode is notified when the game ball passes through the passing port and the first ball port or the second ball port. Since the game ball is notified with a length equal to or longer than the time required for the ball to enter, the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing of passing through the passage. Can be made to remind the player as follows. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Temporary reserved symbols are displayed at winning timing)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, On the basis of that the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; In a gaming machine having a game ball, a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening are alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on that the game ball has passed through the passing port, and that the first ball port and the second ball port are Discriminating means for discriminating to which one, a first notifying means for notifying a first notifying mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a game ball at the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second notification unit that changes the first notification mode based on the entry of a ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Grant bonus games that are advantageous to the player based on A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passport is alternately arranged between the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on the game ball having passed through the passing port, and the first ball entry port and the second ball entry ball are distributed by the sorting means. Determination means for determining which of the two is to be distributed to the mouth, first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the entry of a game ball. Thereby, in the first notification mode that is notified by passing through the passing port and in the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port by entering the passing port. The player can be made to think as if he / she has entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort due to the time difference between the timing at which the player enters the passage and the timing at which the player enters the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification mode even if the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. In this case, the gaming machine B2 sets the first notification mode to the non-information mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the first notification means, when notifying the first notification mode, outputs the second notification even if the first notification mode has elapsed for a predetermined time or more. When the notification is not changed to the second notification mode by the notification means, the first notification mode is set to the non-report mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passing port enters the first or second ball input port. This has the effect that the player can be made aware of the fact that he did not do so.

<Character C group> (Pseudo hold design and main hold design are displayed respectively)
A first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and first information based on a game ball entering the first entrance. Acquiring means for acquiring and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the first information and the second information acquired by the acquiring means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the information, a predetermined time on the display means identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means to dynamically display, until the lottery condition is satisfied, On the basis of that the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; In a gaming machine having a game ball, a passing opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing opening are alternately distributed to the first entrance and the second entrance. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on that the game ball has passed through the passing port, and that the first ball port and the second ball port are Determining means for determining which order is to be sorted, and decorative pattern display means for displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative pattern display means, Based on the satisfaction of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit is hidden, and the dynamic display unit includes Based on the fulfillment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a first entrance where game balls can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball enters the first entrance. An acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the information, and acquires the second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition unit when the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Grant bonus games that are advantageous to the player based on A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passport is alternately arranged between the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A game ball that has passed through the passing port based on the game ball having passed through the passing port, and the first ball entry port and the second ball entry ball are distributed by the sorting means. A determining means for determining whether the order is assigned to the mouth or the mouth, and a decorative symbol displaying means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means; The means, based on the establishment of the start condition, for hiding the decorative symbol displayed first among the decorative symbols displayed on the display means, the dynamic display means , Based on establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can be notified that the ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance with the decorative design. Therefore, discomfort due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the starting condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize whether the start condition is satisfied. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first ball entrance or the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second ball entrance displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C3 comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference between the number of the first information and the number of the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first ball entrance or the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second ball entrance displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. Since it has a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference between the number of the first information or the second information, it is determined whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference discriminating means determines whether or not the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance after the game ball passes through the passage opening is longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. A gaming machine C4 for determining the difference based on the passage of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the difference discriminating means determines whether the gaming ball is to be inserted into the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage opening. Since the difference is determined based on the lapse of a reference time equal to or longer than the time required to enter the mouth, the game ball that has passed through the passage is the first entrance or the second entrance. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determination means determines the difference based on a game ball having entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined, it is possible to determine whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. In the case of having a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information being dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information When the start condition is set by the condition setting means in the case of the game machine, the display is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5. That is, when it is determined by the difference determination unit that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit, the dynamic display is performed. Having a condition setting means for setting the start condition within a dynamic display time of the identification information, wherein the dynamic display means is provided by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, the dynamic display is started again after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the numbers of the first information and the second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means displays the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determining means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decorative symbol corresponding to the smaller number of the first information or the second information is additionally displayed by a difference number, and the gaming machine C7 is characterized by the above-mentioned. .

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a prize is notified by outputting a prize sound or the like based on a prize of a game medium to a ball entrance, and whether or not the prize is determined.
In some cases, an introduction channel for introducing a game medium to the entrance is provided for the purpose of, for example, distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance.
For example, in a gaming machine having two types of entrances, by allocating in the introduction flow path, it is possible to alternately win the game media to the two types of entrances, thereby enabling two types of entrances There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball from being biased toward one of the mouths (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).
However, in a gaming machine configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the inside of the introduction flow path, despite the player being unable to visually recognize the prize of the game medium to the entrance provided in the introduction flow path, Since a prize is notified by outputting a prize sound or the like based on a game medium prize at the entrance, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.
The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a player's discomfort.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical concept 1 comprises a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance Acquiring means for acquiring first information based on a game ball having entered the mouth and acquiring second information based on having entered the second ball entrance, and having the lottery condition satisfied A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time; Dynamic display means for displaying; storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied; and storing the first information or the second information in the storage means. Based on the information being stored, an identification symbol indicating the number of each is stored The bonus symbol game which is advantageous to the player is provided based on the display of the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the note display means and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. A bonus game providing means, and a passport having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and passing the passport through the game ball to the first entrance and the second entrance. The game device includes a sorting means capable of alternately sorting, and a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein, when a game ball passes through the passing port, the passing game ball is connected to the first entrance and the first ball entrance by the sorting unit. There is provided a discriminating means for discriminating to which of the two entrances the ball is to be distributed, and the notifying means notifies a notifying mode capable of discriminating a discrimination result by the discriminating means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first entrance into which the game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball in the first entrance Means for acquiring first information based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and acquiring second information based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entrance; A lottery means for executing a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information obtained by the method, and a dynamic means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on a display means for a predetermined time. Display means, storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the first information or the second information is stored in the storage means. On the basis of that, the identification symbol indicating the number of each stored in the display means Based on the display of the identification symbol display means to be displayed, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, to give a privilege game which is advantageous to the player. Means, having a passage having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and alternately distributing the game ball through the passage through the first entrance and the second entrance. And a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage opening.
Thereby, the notification mode is notified by passing through the passage opening, so that a sense of incongruity due to a time difference from passing through the passage opening to entering the first entrance opening and the second entrance opening is notified by the notification operation. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when a game ball passes through the passing port, a discriminating means for discriminating whether the passing game ball is to be distributed to the first entrance port or the second entrance port by the distribution means. And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode in which a judgment result by the discriminating means can be determined.
As a result, the player can know in advance which of the first entrance and the second entrance can be assigned a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily predict future game development.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First ball entrance (first ball entry means)
64b 2nd ball entrance (2nd ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (part of dynamic display means)
203 a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area (part of storing means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means )
64 0 sorting unit (passing means)
900 sorting member (guidance means)
Part of S406 determination means
Part of S506 determination means
Part of S606 acquisition means
Part of S613 acquisition means
S1104 jackpot control process (bonus game execution means)
Part of S1508 effect design display means
Part of S1514 effect design display means
S1703 first identification symbol display means
S1710 Second identification symbol display means

Claims (2)

A first entrance where game balls can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
Acquiring means for acquiring first information based on a game ball having entered the first entrance, and acquiring second information based on having entered the second entrance,
A lottery unit that executes a lottery based on each of the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit, when a lottery condition is satisfied;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on the display means for a predetermined time;
Storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, until the lottery condition is satisfied;
Based on the first information or the second information being stored in the storage means, an identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating the number of respective storages on the display means,
A gaming machine having a bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the display of the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. At
A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter,
Distributing means that can pass through the passage opening and alternately distribute the game ball to the first entrance and the second entrance;
A notifying unit for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening. When a game ball passes through the passage opening, the game device has a determination unit that determines which of the first entrance and the second entrance is distributed to the passed game ball by the distribution unit. ,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notifying unit notifies a notifying mode in which a determination result by the determining unit can be determined.

Images